Download Philips AZ2558
Transcript
az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039 az2558/17 13/5/03 12:15 Page 1 Return your Warranty Registration card today to 2558 MP3-CD Soundmachine AZ AZ ensure you receive all the benefits you’re entitled to. Return your Warranty Registration Card within 10 days EE CALL US BEFORE YOU CONSIDER RETURNING THE PRODUCT! E S Philips representatives are ready to help you with any questions about your new product.We can guide you through Connections, First-time Setup, or any of the Features. We want you to start enjoying your new product right away! RTAN PO • So complete and return the Warranty Registration Card enclosed with your purchase at once, and take advantage of these important benefits. T! Need help? Call us! IM • Once your Philips purchase is registered, you’re eligible to receive all the privileges of owning a Philips product. WH Y INS ID 1-800-531-0039 or Visit us on the web at www.philips.com IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Warranty Verification Owner Confirmation Model Registration Registering your product within 10 days confirms your right to maximum protection under the terms and conditions of your Philips warranty. Your completed Warranty Registration Card serves as verification of ownership in the event of product theft or loss. Returning your Warranty Registration Card right away guarantees you’ll receive all the information and special offers which you qualify for as the owner of your model. 8. 9. Know these safety symbols For Customer Use Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of the cabinet. Retain this information for future reference. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Model No. _______________________ Serial No. ________________________ This “bolt of lightning” indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. WARNING: TO PREVENT The “exclamation point” calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot, and fully insert. FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION: To prevent electric 10. 11. English Knoxville, Tennessee 37914-1810, U.S.A. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie pour vous assurer de recevoir tous les avantages auxquels vous avez droit. • Dès que l’achat de votre appareil Philips est enregistré, vous avez droit à tous les avantages dont bénéficient les possesseurs des produits Philips. Meet Philips at the Internet • Remplissez et renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie jointe à votre appareil sans tarder et vous bénéficierez de ces avantages importants. Français Español Vérification de garantie Confirmation de possession Enregistrement du modèle Enregistrez votre produit dans les 10 jours pour confirmer votre droit à une protection maximum selon les termes et les conditions de votre garantie Philips. Votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie prouve que vous possédez l’appareil en cas de vol ou de perte du produit. Renvoyez votre carte d’enregistrement de garantie dès aujourd’hui pour vous assurer de recevoir toutes les informations, les offres et les bonus auxquels vous avez droit en tant que possesseur de ce modèle. AZ 2558 symboles de CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT sécurite ATTENTION: POUR REDUIRE LE RESQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, NE PAS ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE (NI LE PANNEAU ARRIERE). CET APPAREIL NE COMPORTE AUCUNE PIECE POUVANT TRE REPAREE PAR L’UTILISATEUR. CONFIER SON ENTRETIEN A UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIE. Cet « éclair à pointe de flèche » indique qu’un matériau non isolé, situé à l’intérieur de l’unité, risque de provoquer un choc électrique. Pour la sécurité de chacun, nous vous prions de ne pas retirer le boîtier de ce produit. Printed in China Canada English:This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Français: Cet appareil numérique n'émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans le Règlement sur le Brouillage Radioélectrique édicté par le Ministère des Communications du Canada. Le « point d’exclamation » attire votre attention sur des sujets risquant de provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement et d’entretien si vous ne lisez pas les informations s’y reportant. Note : This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures : – Relocate the receiving antenna. – Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. – Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. – Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. sur roulettes, un support, un pied, une 3. Respectez les avertissements. étagère ou une table de type recom- 4. Suivez toutes les instructions. mandé par le fabricant. Si vous utilisez un N’utilisez pas cet appareil à proximité d’une meuble sur roulettes, veillez à le déplacer source d’eau. avec précaution afin d’éviter tout acci- 5. 7. 8. 12. dent corporel si l’équipement se renver- fon sec. sait. N’obstruez aucun orifice de ventilation. doit rester inutilisé pendant une période de temps fabricant. prolongée. N’installez pas l’appareil près d’une source de amplificateurs) dégageant de la chaleur. d’alimentation ou de la prise, liquide renversé sur l’ap- Ne détruisez pas la sécurité incorporée dans la pareil, ou encore si un objet est tombé dessus, si l’ap- prise de terre ou prise pareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité, s’il ne polarisée fournie. Une fonctionne pas correctement ou s’il a fait une chute. Prise polarisée C.A. IMPORTANT : Modifications not authorized by the manufacturer may void users authority to operate this device. Registre su producto dentro de 10 días para confirmar su derecho a máxima protección bajo los términos y condiciones de la garantía de Philips. Su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía comprueba que Ud. es el dueño del aparato en caso de robo o pérdida del producto. La devolución inmediata de su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía le garantiza que recibirá toda la información y todas las promociones especiales que le corresponden por ser el dueño de su modelo. seguridad dont une plus large que l’autre. Une prise de terre est blessures corporelles, des dommages matériels, ou dotée de deux fiches semblables et d’une troisième, d’endommager l’appareil : PRECAUCION: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA,NO RETIRE LA CUBIERTA (NI EL PANEL POSTERIOR). ESTE APARATONO CONTIENE NINGUNA PARTE QUE PUEDA SER REPARADA POREL USARIO. DE SER NECESARIO ALGUN SERVICIO O REPARACIONDEL APARATO, LLEVELO UN TECNICO CALIFICADO. El símbolo del «rayo» indica que algún material no aislado dentro de su unidad podría resultar en una sacudida eléctrica. Para la seguridad de todos, favor de no remover la cubierta del producto. de marcher dessus ou de le pincer particulièrement El «signo de exclamación» le llama la atención a características sobre las que Ud. debe leer la información adjunta detenidamente para evitar problemas de funcionamiento y mantenimiento. WHO IS COVERED? You must have proof of purchase to exchange the product. A sales receipt or other document showing that you purchased the product is considered proof of purchase. Attach it to this owner’s manual and keep both nearby. WHAT IS COVERED? Warranty coverage begins the day you buy your product. For one year thereafter, a defective or inoperative product will be replaced with a new, renewed or comparable product at no charge to you. A replacement product is covered only for the original warranty period.When the warranty on the original product expires, the warranty on the replacement product also expires. WHAT IS EXCLUDED? Your warranty does not cover: • labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjustment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna systems outside of the product. • product repair and/or part replacement because of misuse, accident, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of Philips. • reception problems caused by signal conditions or cable or antenna systems outside the unit. • a product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. • incidental or consequential damages resulting from the product. (Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.This includes, but is not limited to, prerecorded material, whether copyrighted or not copyrighted.) • a product used for commercial or institutional purposes. WHERE IS EXCHANGE AVAILABLE? You may exchange the product in all countries where the product is officially distributed by Philips. In countries where Philips does not distribute the product, the local Philips service organization will attempt to provide a replacement product (although there may be a delay if the appropriate product is not readily available). BEFORE REQUESTING EXCHANGE... Please check your owner's manual for assistance. If you have additional questions, call us at 1-800-531-0039. EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN U.S.A., PUERTO RICO, OR U.S.VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact 1-800-531-0039 to arrange an exchange. Or, ship the product, insured and freight prepaid, and with proof of purchase enclosed, to the address listed below. Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (In U.S.A., Puerto Rico, and U.S.Virgin Islands, all implied warranties, including implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited in duration to the duration of this express warranty. But, because some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, this limitation may not apply to you.) EXCHANGING A PRODUCT IN CANADA... Please contact Philips at: 1-800-661-6162 (French Speaking) 1-800-531-0039 (English or Spanish Speaking) (In Canada, this warranty is given in lieu of all other warranties. No other warranties are expressed or implied, including any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Philips is not liable under any circumstances for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, howsoever incurred, even if notified of the possibility of such damages.) REMEMBER... Please record below the model and serial numbers found on the product. Also, please fill out and mail your warranty registration card promptly. It will be easier for us to notify you if necessary. MODEL # __________________________________ SERIAL # __________________________________ lines, etc.). ● Enlevez les piles lorsque l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période. EL 6475-F003: 02/8 Symbole d’ un appareil de classe II Ce symbole indique que l’appareil est équipé d’un système à double isolation. INSTRUCCIONES IMPORTANTES DE SEGURIDAD 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8. 9. 10. 11. MAC5097 Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA, (402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Échange gratuite pendant un an Il faut porter ce produit à un centre de service pour l’échanger. QUI EST COUVERT ? Il faudra présenter une preuve d’achat pour pouvoir bénéficier des services de la garantie. Le reçu, la facture ou un autre document portant la date d’achat qui prouve que vous avez bien acheté le produit est considéré comme preuve d’achat. L’attacher à ce manuel d’emploi et les garder tous les deux à portée de main. QU’EST-CE QUI EST COUVERT ? La couverture de la garantie entre en vigueur le jour où vous achetez le produit. Pendant un an à compter de cette date, tout produit défectueux ou qui ne fonctionne pas sera remplacé par un produit neuf, renouvelé ou un produit comparable sans frais aucun au consommateur. Un produit de remplacement n’est couvert que pendant la période non-écoulée de garantie d’origine. Lorsque la garantie du produit d’origine vient à terme, la garantie du produit de remplacement est terminée aussi. QU’EST-CE QUI EST EXCLU DE LA GARANTIE ? La garantie ne couvre pas : • les frais de main d’œuvre pour installer ou préparer, pour régler les commandes et pour installer ou réparer les systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur du produit. • la réparation du produit et/ou d’une pièce pour cause du mauvais emploi, d’accident, de réparations non-agréées ou d’une autre raison qui ne peut pas être contrôlée par Philips. • des problèmes de réception dûs à des conditions de signal, au câble ou aux systèmes d’antenne à l’extérieur de l’unité. • un produit qui nécessite des modifications ou adaptations pour lui permettre de fonctionner dans un pays autre que le pays pour lequel il a été conçu, fabriqué, agréé et/ou autorisé, ou la réparation des produits endommagés par de telles modifications. • des dommages indirects ou conséquents qui résultent du produit. (Certains états ou provinces ne permettent pas l’exclusion de dommages indirects ou conséquents. Il est donc possible que l’exclusion ci-dessus ne s’applique pas au cas présent. Cela comprend, mais de façon non-limitative, des enregistrements, qu’ils soient protégés ou non par les lois sur les droits d’auteur). • un produit utilisé pour des raisons commerciales ou institutionnelles. OÙ L’ÉCHANGE EST-ELLE PROPOSÉE ? Le produit pourra s’échanger dans tous les pays où le produit est distribué officiellement par Philips. Dans des pays où Philips ne distribue pas le produit, l’organisme local de service Philips tentera de fournir un produit de remplacement (mais il pourra y avoir des retards si le bon produit n’est pas facilement disponible). Lea estas instrucciones. Conserve estas instrucciones. Lea todos los avisos. Siga todas las instrucciones. No utilice este aparato cerca del agua. Para limpiar el aparato utilice sólo un trapo seco. No tape las aperturas de ventilación. Proceda a su instalación de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante. No instale el equipo cerca de fuentes de calor – Como radiadores, calentadores, estufas o cualquier otro aparato (incluyendo los amplificadores) generador de calor. No anule la seguridad de la clavija de corriente Clavija polarizada (ya sea de tipo polarde CA izado o con toma de tierra). Las clavijas polarizadas tienen dos patillas, una más ancha que la otra. Las que disponen de toma de tierra tienen dos patillas y una tercera que es la de conexión a tierra.Tanto la patilla más ancha como la toma de tierra han sido incorporadas a la clavija para su seguridad personal. Si la clavija suministrada con el equipo no es compatible con su toma de corriente, consulte a un electricista para sustituir la toma de corriente obsoleta. Proteja debidamente el cable impidiendo que pueda pisarse o incluso perforarse, especialmente en la parte más próxima a la clavija y en el punto de salida del equipo. Utilice exclusivamente aquellos dispositivos/ accesorios recomendados por el fabricante. 12. Coloque el equipo exclusivamente sobre aquellos carros, bases, trípodes, soportes o mesas especificados por el comerciante o vendidos con el equipo. Cuando utilice un carro, tenga cuidado al desplazar el conjunto carro/ equipo para evitar posibles daños por vuelco. 13. Desenchufe el aparato durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no vaya a ser utilizado durante largo tiempo. 14. Confíe el mantenimiento y las reparaciones a personal técnico especializado. El equipo deberá repararse siempre que haya resultado dañado de alguna manera, como por ejemplo por daños en el cable o en la clavija, por derrame de líquido sobre el equipo, por objetos que hubieran podido introducirse en su interior, por exposición del equipo a la lluvia o a ambientes húmedos, cuando el equipo no funcione con normalidad o cuando hubiera sufrido algún tipo de caída. 15. Uso de las pilas – ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir escapes en las pilas, que pueden ocasionar lesiones físicas, daños a su propiedad o dañar la unidad: ● Instale todas las pilas correctamente, + y como está marcado en la unidad. ● No mezcle las pilas (viejas con nuevas o de carbono y alcalinas, etc.). ● Extraiga las pilas cuando no vaya a usar la unidad durante largo tiempo. EL 6475-S003: 02/8 Símbolo del equipo Clase II Este símbolo indica que la unidad tiene un sistema doble de aislamiento. SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES – remote control – USB cable – video cable – CD-ROM USB PC LINK installers – AC power cord TOP AND FRONT PANEL (See 1) 1 p - 3.5 mm stereo headphone jack. Note: The speakers will be muted when headphones are connected to the set. 2 VOLUME -adjust volume level or equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 3 STANDBY ON y - switch the set on/ off. 4 SOURCE - selects sound source for functions: CD/ TUNER/ USB PC LINK/ GAME •AUX 5 IR SENSOR -infrared sensor for remote control 6 LCD Display - shows the status of the set 7 [dB]: - display to indicate bass power. 8 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. SEARCH ∞ , § MP3-CD / CD : - searches backward or forward ; - skips to the beginning of a current track/ previous/ later track. USB PC LINK -skips to the beginning of a previous/ later track. TUNER : - tunes to radio stations 2;- starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. MODE : - selects different MP3-CD play modes: e.g. repeat or shuffle order. 9 USB - connect the supplied USB cable here to the USB port of your computer 0 GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in GAME •AUX mode WOOX - selects special bass enhancement on/ off EQUALIZER -selects bass, mid and high frequencies. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER GARANTIE LIMITÉE AVANT DE DEMANDER UNE ÉCHANGE… Veuillez consulter votre guide d'utilisation pour assistance. Si vous avez d'autres questions, contactez-nous au 1-800-531-0039. POUR BÉNÉFICIER DE L’ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AUX É.-U., AU PUERTO RICO OU DANS LES ÎLES VIERGES AMÉRICAINES… Contactez 1-800-531-0039 pour organiser un échange. Ou bien, renvoyer le produit, frêt et assurances payés, avec preuve d’achat incluse, à l’adresse ci-dessous : Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (Aux É.-U., au Puerto Rico et aux Îles Vierges, toute garantie implicite, y compris des garanties de vendabilité et d’aptitude à un but spécifique, est limitée à la durée de cette garantie explicite. Mais, étant donné que certains états et provinces ne permettent pas de limité la durée d’une garantie implicite, cette limitation pourrait ne pas s’appliquer au cas présent.) POUR BÉNÉFICIER D’UNE ÉCHANGE GARANTIE AU CANADA… Veuillez contacter Philips au : 1-800-661-6162 (Francophone) 1-800-531-0039 (Anglophone ou hispanophone) (Au Canada, cette garantie est consentie à la place de toute autre garantie.Aucune autre garantie n’est donnée, qu’elle soit explicite ou implicite, y compris une garantie implicite de vendabilité ou d’aptitude à un but spécifique. Philips n’est pas, en aucun cas, responsable des dommages, qu’ils soit directs ou indirects, spéciaux, secondaires ou conséquents, quels que soient leurs origines, même en présence d’une notification de la possibilité de tels dommages.) RAPPEL IMPORTANT... Veuillez inscrire ci-dessous les numéros de modèle et de série qui se trouvent sur le produit même. De plus, veuillez remplir et renvoyer sans délai la carte d’enregistrement de garantie. Il nous sera ainsi plus facile de vous contacter en cas de besoin. Nº DE MODÈLE _____________________________ Nº DE SÉRIE _____________________________ options recommandés par le fabricant. No. de serie ______________________ sacudida eléctrica, introduzca la patilla ancha del enchufe al fondo de la ranura ancha. des usagées ou de piles au carbone avec des alca- 11. Utilisez uniquement des accessoires ou No. de modelo ____________________ PRECAUCION: Para evitar Ne mélangez pas les piles (pas de piles neuves avec de raccordement sur l’appareil lui-même. Para uso del cliente: Escriba abajo el número de serie que se encuentra en el panel posterior. Guarde esta información para el futuro. TAR EL RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA O INCENDIO, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LLUVIA NI A HUMEDAD. Installez toutes les piles correctement, + et - tels qu’indiqués sur l’appareil. ● aux endroits des prises, mâles et femelles, et au point 7. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVI- ● 10. Protégez le cordon d’alimentation pour éviter PRECAUCION RIESGO DE SACUDIDA ELECTRICA NO ABRIR toute fuite des piles qui risquerait de causer des pour remplacer et adapter votre prise murale. MAC5097 Registro del modelo 15. PRÉCAUTION d’emploi des piles – Afin d’éviter sécurité. Si la prise fournie ne convient pas à la prise chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. • Sírvase llenar y devolver en seguida la Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía empacada con su aparato y saque provecho de estas ventajas importantes. qualifié. Une réparation sera nécessaire si l’appareil a subi des dommages tels que détérioration du cordon deux lames DANGER: NE PAS EXPOSER ATTENTION: Pour éviter les 14. Pour toute réparation, faites appel à un personnel de chaleur, cuisinières, ou autres appareils (même des prise polarisée est dotée de N° de série ______________________ CET ÉQUIPEMENT A LA PLUIE NI A UNE HUMIDITÉ EXCESSIVE POUR ÉVITER LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE ET DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. 13. Débranchez l’appareil pendant les orages ou s’il Installez l’appareil selon les instructions du chaleur comme par exemple des radiateurs, bouches 9. Utilisez uniquement un meuble Nettoyez l’appareil uniquement avec un chif- plus large, qui assure la mise à la terre pour votre Confirmación del dueño simbolos de One Year Free Exchange This product must be carried in for an exchange. EL 6475-E004: 02/8 Conservez ces instructions. N° de modèle ____________________ Verificación de la garantía Conozca estos ● 2. 6. The set complies with the FCC-Rules, Part 15 and with 21 CFR 1040.10. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2.This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. ● PORTABLE AUDIO SYSTÈME SONORE PORTABLE Cet espace vous est réservé Inscrivez ci-dessous le numéro de série situé à l’arrière du bloc. Conservez cette information pour vous y reporter à l’avenir. Envie hoy su Tarjeta de Registro de la Garantía para recibir todas las ventajas correspondientes. • Una vez que se registre la compra de su aparato Philips, Ud. tiene derecho a todas las ventajas correspondientes al dueño de un producto Philips. ● Lisez ces instructions. murale dont vous disposez, consultez un électricien 3140 115 3102.1 15. 1. AT T E N T I O N RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 14. CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES 6. Connaissez ces 13. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. Battery usage CAUTION – To prevent battery leakage which may result in bodily injury, property damage, or damage to the unit: Install all batteries correctly, + and - as marked on the unit. Do not mix batteries (old and new or carbon and alkaline, etc.). Remove batteries when the unit is not used for a long time. Class II equipment symbol This symbol indicates that the unit has a double insulation system. http://www.philips.com W 12. English This warranty gives you specific legal rights.You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. MAC5097 PHILIPS CONSUMER ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICA Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer´s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the AC Polarized polarized or Plug grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong.The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. LIMITED WARRANTY Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pourriez avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état en état et de province en province. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, É.-U.,(402) 536-4171 IMPORTANT SPECIFICATIONS Supported formats: • Disc format ISO9660, Joliet and multi-session CDs. Use ISO9660 disc format when burning CDROMs. • MP3 music fomats. • MP3 bit rate (data rate): 32-320 Kbps and variable bit rate. • 650Mb and 700Mb CD-R and CD-RWs. • Directory nesting up to a maximum of 8 levels (max. 64 characters). General information The music compression technology MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) reduces the original digital audio data by a factor up to 10 without losing significant sound quality. This allows you to record up to 10 hours of CD-like quality music on a single CD-ROM. How to get MP3 music Either download legal MP3 music from the internet or convert your audio CD into MP3 format with any MP3 encoder software, and then record onto a CD-R(W). • To achieve a good sound quality a bit rate of at least 128kbps is recommended for MP3 files. • Some encoder software offer an option to protect music files, i.e. the files can only be played on the computer which created them. If you burn such files on a CD-ROM, you cannot play them on this set. Make sure to deactivate the protection option in the encoder software before creating the music files. In this case you are responsible for adherence to all local or international copyrights. When burning the MP3-CD • To avoid problems with playback or missing files, make sure the file names are typed in English text characters and that the MP3 files end with .mp3 • Use a writing software capable of recording MP3 track titles (files) in numerical and alphabetical order. For details on using the software, refer to the operating instructions of the software. • When recording on a CD-RW, make sure that you close (finalize) all sessions in order for the set to read and play your tracks. CONTROL PROG MP3-CD / CD : -programs tracks and reviews the programmed songs; TUNER : - programs radio stations. FM•AM / DISPLAY FM•AM : - selects waveband DISPLAY: - display MP3-CD functions ! AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) -LINE-IN jack for external audio appliance. VIDEO IN - to keep video plug in place @ OPEN•CLOSE – press to open/ close CD door BACK PANEL (See 1) # Telescopic antenna - improved FM reception $ Battery compartment - for 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells % AC MAINS - inlet for power cord ^ VIDEO OUT- connect to the VIDEO IN jack on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. REMOTE CONTROL (See 1) 1 CD - selects MP3-CD / CD sound source TUNER - selects tuner source / wavebands USB - selects USB PC LINK AUX - selects GAME •AUX 2 y -switches the set to standby / on if set operating on AC power. (Switches set off only if battery powered) 3 REPEAT -repeat all tracks in USB PC LINK source or selects the repeat modes in CD source SHUFFLE -plays MP3-CD / CD tracks in random order in CD / USB PC LINK source MUTE - interrupts/ resumes sound 4 VOL 4, 3 -- adjust volume level or adjust equalizer level (BASS/ MID /HIGH) 5 ¡ , ™ -select previous/ next track in MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 9 - stop MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback; - erases a MP3-CD / CD program. 2; - starts or pauses MP3-CD / CD / USB PC LINK playback 5 / 6 -searches backwards/ forwards within a MP3-CD / CD track. TUNER: - tunes to radio stations MP3-CD / CD PLAYER How to organize MP3 files You can store up to a maximum number of 35 albums and 400 titles on one MP3-CD, depending on the song file sizes. Albums and titles are alphabetically sorted. • MP3-CD/ CD albums and titles are shown as numbers in the display. IMPORTANT! This set does not play/support the following: • Empty albums: an empty album is an album that does not contain MP3 files, and will not be shown in the display. • Non-supported file formats are skipped. This means that e.g.: Word documents .doc or MP3 files with extension .dlf are ignored and will not be played. • Playlist Files e.g. .m3u, .pls of WMA, AAC, Winamp, Sonic, RealJukebox, MS Mediaplayer 7.0, MusicMatch. • Recordings created on e.g. PacketWriting and Package Writing. Playing MP3-CD & CD This CD player plays Audio Discs including CD-R(W)s, and MP3 CD-ROMs. • CD-I, CDV, VCD, DVD or computer CDs, are not possible. 1. Press STANDBY ON y once or more to on, then select CD SOURCE. 2. Press OPEN•CLOSE to open the CD door. ] is displayed when the CD door is open. 3. Insert a CD with the printed side facing up and press down on OPEN•CLOSE to close the CD door. ]Display show ,when reading disc contents; ]Display : if no disc inserted/ disc incorrectly inserted., ]Display : or if disc damaged / dirty:. – throughout CD operation; – throughout MP3-CD operation; – In CD stop mode: total track number and total playback time. POWER SUPPLY BASIC FUNCTIONS 6 EQUALIZER -- selects bass, mid and high frequencies WOOX -- select special bass enhancement on/ off GAMESOUND - select sound effects: BLAST/ PUNCH/ SPEED/ NORMAL in game mode 7 ALBUM /PRESET -, + : MP3 only :- select previous / next album. TUNER :-select a previous / next preset station. POWER-SAVING AUTOMATIC STANDBY As a power-saving feature, the system automatically switches to standby 15 minutes after MP3-CD / CD has reached the end and no control is operated. POWER SUPPLY Whenever convenient, use the power supply to conserve battery life. Make sure you remove the power cord from the set and wall jack before inserting batteries. Switching on and off and selecting function 1. Press STANDBY ON y on the set to switch on. 2. Press SOURCE once or more to select your desired function: CD, TUNER, USB PC LINK or GAME•AUX . 3. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Batteries (not included) (See 1) • Insert 8 batteries, type R-20, UM-1 or D-cells, (preferably alkaline) with the correct polarity. Remote control (See A) • Insert 2 batteries, type AAA, R03 or UM4 (preferably alkaline). Incorrect use of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage and will corrode the compartment or cause the batteries to burst. • Do not mix battery types: e.g. alkaline with carbon zinc. Only use batteries of the same type for the set. • When inserting new batteries, do not try to mix old batteries with the new ones. • Batteries contain chemical substances, so they should be disposed of properly. Using AC Power 1. Check if the AC power supply, as shown on the type plate located on the bottom of the set, corresponds to your local power supply. If it does not, consult your dealer or service center. 2. If your set is equipped with a voltage selector, adjust the selector so that it matches with the local power supply. 3. Connect the power cord to the wall jack and the set is now ready for use. 4. To disconnect the power supply, unplug the set from the wall jack. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER – is shown if you have inserted a non-finalized CD-R(W) / black disc. Note: MP3-CDs may take more than 10 seconds to read. 4. Press 2; to start playback. =Display: Current track number and elapsed track time during MP3-CD / CD playback. =If MP3-CD, the album number also is shown. 5. To pause playback press 2;. Press 2; again to resume play. = Time digits flashes during pause. 6. To stop MP3-CD / CD playback, press 9. 7. Press STANDBY ON y to switch off the set. Note: MP3-CD / CD play will also stop when: – the CD door is opened – the CD has reached the end – you select other sound source. MP3-CD/ CD text display During playback, press the FM•AM / DISPLAY button briefly and repeatedly to view text information: MP3-CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – track name and elapsed track time; – album name and elapsed track time; – album number, track number and elapsed track time; – ID3 tag details, if available. Otherwise, display shows . CDs Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to view e.g. – Current track number and elapsed track time during CD playback; – Remaining playback time of current track. Selecting a different track • Press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™) once or repeatedly until the desired track number appears in the display. • If you have selected a track number shortly after loading a disc or in the PAUSE position, you will need to press 2; to start playback. The type plate is located on the bottom of the set. BASIC FUNCTIONS Note : The tone, sound settings, tuner presets and the volume level (up to a maximum volume level of VOL 20 ) will be retained in the set's memory. Adjusting volume and sound (See 2) 1. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME control. = Display shows the volume level and a number from 0-32. 2. wOOx To enhance the bass response: press wOOx once or more to switch on / off. = wOOx-key backlight lights up when wOOx is turned on. Notes: - wOOx can be used when you play TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. - Some discs might be recorded in high modulation, which causes a distortion at high volume. If this occurs, deactivate wOOx or reduce the volume. 3. EQUALIZER To adjust the bass, mid and high frequencies press EQUALIZER once or more, then rotate VOLUME within 3 seconds to adjust each level. =Display briefly shows , or , level (-5 to +5) or . Note: 1. EQUALIZER can be used during TUNER, CD, USB PC LINK and GAME•AUX source. MP3-CD / CD PLAYER MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album. ] Display: if no albums are available. Finding a passage within a track 1. Press and hold SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control 5 or 6). – The CD is played at high speed and low volume. – No sound is heard during MP3-CD fast cue/ review. 2. When you recognize the passage you want, release ∞ or §. Normal playback continues.(on the remote control 5 or 6) Note: Searching is only possible within a track. Different play modes: SHUFFLE and REPEAT (See 4 - 7) You can select and change the various play modes before or during playback. The play modes can also be combined with PROGRAM. shuffle - tracks of the entire CD/ program are played in random order shuffle repeat all - to repeat the entire CD/ program continuously in random order repeat all - repeats the entire CD/ program repeat - plays the current track continuously 1. To select play mode, press MODE once or more. (SHUFFLE / REPEAT on the remote control). 2. Press 2; to start playback if in the stop position. ]If you have selected shuffle, playback starts automatically. 3. To select normal playback, press MODE repeatedly until the various modes are no longer displayed. – You can also press the 9 to cancel your play mode in playing. DIGITAL TUNER 2. To prevent sound interference the bass control options operate exclusively. You cannot combine the bass from EQUALIZER with wOOx 4. GAMESOUND To adjust the game sound, press GAMESOUND once or more to select your option. =Display briefly shows , , or . DIGITAL TUNER 1 until you have found optimal reception. To improve radio reception: • For FM, extend, incline and turn the telescopic antenna. Reduce its length if the signal is too strong. • For AM, the set uses a built-in antenna. Direct this antenna by turning the whole set. HEAVY ! Take care of your CD Soundmachine. Grip both handles when you carry or lift the set. Programming tuner stations: 1 Note: GAMESOUND is only available when you play in GAME•AUX source. You can store up to a total of 30 radio stations in the memory, manually or automatically (Autostore). 2 How to MUTE the sound 1. Press MUTE on the remote control to interrupt sound reproduction instantly. = Playback continues without sound and the display flashes . Autostore Automatic programming will start from preset 1. The set will only program stations which are not in the memory already. 1. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to select the preset number . 2. Press PROG for 4 seconds or more to activate auto store programming. = Display: is shown and available stations are programmed in order of waveband FM, followed by AM , preset 1 station will then be played after all stations are stored automatically. 2. To reactivate sound reproduction you can: – press MUTE again; – adjust the volume controls; – change to another source. DIGITAL TUNER (See 3) Tuning to stations 1. Press STANDBY ON y to on, then press SOURCE once or more to select TUNER (or press TUNER once on the remote control). = Display: shows briefly followed by waveband, frequency, and preset station number if already stored. 2. Press FM•AM / DISPLAY once or more to select your waveband ( TUNER on the remote control) 3. Tuning to stations: you can tune to your stations manually or by automatic search tuning: Press down on ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) and release button when the frequency in the display starts running. = The radio automatically tunes to a station of sufficient reception. Display shows during automatic tuning. 4. Repeat step 3 if necessary until you find the desired station. • To tune to a weak station, press ∞ or § (5 or 6 on the remote control ) briefly and repeatedly MP3-CD / CD PLAYER Programming track numbers Program in the stop position to select and store your CD tracks in the desired sequence. If you like, store any track more than once. Up to 20 tracks can be stored in the memory. 1. Press SEARCH ∞ or § on the set to select your desired track number.(on the remote control ¡ or ™) MP3-CD mode only: First press ALBUM/ PRESET – or + once or more to find your album, then press SEARCH ∞ or § (on the remote control ¡ or ™). 2. Press PROG. ™ Display: program and the selected track number appears briefly. ™ Display : if no track selected for programming. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 to select and store all desired tracks. ™ Display: if you try to program more than 20 tracks. 4. To start playback of your disc program, press 2;. Note: During normal playback, you can press PROG to add a current track to your program list. Reviewing the program In stop position, press and hold down PROG for a while until the display shows all your stored track numbers in sequence. =Display if no tracks programmed. Erasing a program You can erase the program by: • pressing 9 twice; = displayed briefly, and program disappears. • pressing STANDBY ON y • selecting another sound source • opening the CD door. @ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! Manual programming 1. Tune to your desired station (see Tuning to stations). 2. Press PROG to activate programming. = Display: program flashes. 1 #3 3 5 4 5 $ 5. Repeat the above four steps to store other stations. Note : You can erase a preset station by storing another frequency in its place. 2 4 3. Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more to allocate a number from 1 to 30 to this station. 4. Press PROG again to confirm. = Display shows the preset number, waveband and the frequency of the preset station. 7 ^ 8 x R20/ UM1/ D CELL 6 % To listen to a preset station Press ALBUM / PRESET- or + once or more until the desired preset station is displayed. GAMESOUND / USB PC LINK 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 0 GAMESOUND (See 8) PLAYING WITH GAMESOUND: 1. Press SOURCE once or more on the set to select the GAME•AUX function (AUX on the remote control) =Display scrolls : 2. Connect your console to the cinches on the front of the set AUDIO IN ( LEFT / RIGHT) and VIDEO IN. 3. Press GAMESOUND once or more to select your game sound option. , , =Display briefly shows or . Connecting other equipment to your system Use the supplied video cable to connect the VIDEO OUT terminal on the back of the set to VIDEO IN on a TV or VCR for viewing or recording. USB PC LINK Quick Setup Guide PC system requirements – USB port with Windows 98 SE / ME/ 2000/ XP – Intel Pentium MMXX200 or higher – CD-ROM drive Installing MusicMatch software 1. Use the supplied USB cable to connect the set to the USB port on your computer. (See B) 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK. 3. Turn on your PC then insert the supplied USB PC LINK installer disc in the PC's CD-ROM drive. This application software can also be downloaded from http://www.audio.philips.com. IMPORTANT! Please use this customized MusicMatch software for your USB PC Link application. Remember to un-install all other MusicMatch jukebox software first from your PC system (if available). X 6 A B 2 x AAA USB EL6095T004 / 8-02 USB PC LINK USB PC LINK MAINTENANCE & SAFETY MAINTENANCE & SAFETY English TROUBLESHOOTING GARANTIA LIMITADA SISTEMA DE AUDIO PORTATIL Cambio gratis por un año Se necesita presentarse en persona con este producto para cambiarlo. ¿QUIEN TIENE PROTECCION? Usted debe tener su comprobante de venta para cambiar el producto. Una nota de venta u otro documento mostrando que usted compró el producto se considera un comprobante de venta.Adjúntelo a este manual de instrucciones y reténgalo a la mano. ¿QUE CUBRE? La protección bajo la garantía comienza el mismo día en que usted compra el producto. Durante un año a partir de esta fecha, se reemplazará un producto inoperante o defectuoso con otro nuevo, renovado o comparable sin cargo alguno. Un producto de reemplazo tiene cobertura sólo durante el período de la garantía original. Una vez que venza la garantía original del producto, también habrá vencido la garantía del producto de reemplazo. ¿QUE EXCLUYE LA GARANTIA? Su garantía no cubre: • cobros por mano de obra durante la instalación o montaje del producto, ajuste de los controles del cliente o de preferencia e instalación o reparación de los sistemas con antena fuera de la unidad. • reparación del producto y/o reemplazo de piezas, a raíz de uso indebido, accidente, reparación no autorizada u otra causa no bajo el control de Philips. • problemas de recepción ocasionados por condiciones de señales o sistemas de cable o de antena fuera de la unidad. • un producto que requiera modificación o adaptación para que opere en un país que no sea el país para el que fue concebido, fabricado, aprobado y/o autorizado, o la reparación de productos dañados por tales modificaciones. • daños incidentales o consecuentes que resulten del producto. (Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión por daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que es posible que la exclusión arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted. Esto incluye, sin limitarse, materiales pregrabados con o sin amparo de derechos de autor.) • una unidad que se ha usado para fines comerciales o institucionales. ¿DONDE SE EFECTUA EL CAMBIO? Usted puede cambiar el producto en todos los países con distribución oficial del producto por Philips. En países donde Philips no distribuye el producto, la entidad local de servicio Philips tratará de darle un producto de reemplazo (aunque puede haber demora si el producto apropiado no está fácilmente disponible). ANTES DE PEDIR UN CAMBIO… Por favor, consulte su manual del usuario si necesita ayuda. Si tiene más preguntas, llámenos al 1-800-531-0039. PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN LOS EE.UU., PUERTO RICO O LAS ISLAS VIRGENES… Contacte con el 1-800-531-0039 para concertar un cambio. También, usted puede enviar el producto con el seguro y transporte o franqueo prepagados, adjuntando el comprobante de venta y enviándolo a la dirección a continuación: Philips Exchange Program Suite A 406 North Irish Street Greeneville TN 37745 (En los EE.UU., Puerto Rico o las Islas Vírgenes, toda garantía implícita, inclusive las garantías implícitas de comerciabilidad y aptitud para un propósito en particular, están limitadas en cuanto a duración al plazo de esta garantía expresa. Puesto que algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración de una garantía implícita, es posible que la limitación arriba indicada no le sea aplicable a usted.) PARA CAMBIAR UN PRODUCTO EN EL CANADA… Favor de comunicarse con Philips al: 1-800-661-6162 (francófono) 1-800-531-0039 (anglófono o hispanohablante) (En el Canadá, esta garantía es otorgada en lugar de toda otra garantía. No se otorga ninguna otra garantía expresa ni implícita, comprendiéndose aquí ninguna garantía implícita de comerciabilidad o aptitud para propósito alguno. Philips no será responsable bajo circunstancia alguna por daños y perjuicios directos, indirectos, especiales, incidentales o consecuentes, independientemente de la manera ocasionada, aún con notificación de la posibilidad de los mismos.) RECUERDE… Favor de anotar los números de modelo y serie del producto en el espacio abajo.También, sírvase llenar y enviar oportunamente su tarjeta de registro de la garantía. Así nos será más fácil notificarle en caso de ser necesario. Modelo No. ________________________________ Serie No. ________________________________ 4. The installation guide will appear automatically. If it does not, go to the CD-ROM drive in Windows Explorer and double click on the USB PC LINK.exe. Then perform the following steps: – Select your desired language from the list. – Select installer driver. – Select installer MusicMatch jukebox. – Select other options (Tutorial, Free goodies, FAQ). Note: - You are advised to read the MusicMatch tutorial before using it for the first time. Make sure the volume on your PC is suitably adjusted to ensure sound output on the set. For optimum performance, the equalizer function in MusicMatch should be set to a low level. 5. Launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX and create your own playlist of favorite songs by dragging and dropping the music track from anywhere on your PC into the playlist window. Note: -- If you encounter any problem using the USB PC LINK, please refer to the FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions) stored in your USB PC LINK installer disc or visit www.audio.philips.com for the latest FAQ updates . After setup, refer to "Connecting to USB PC Link" for details on the USB PC LINK operations. Enable digital CD audio output Before playing CDs on your PC’s CD-ROM drive, it is necessary to configure your PC’s hardware as follows: For Windows ME/ 2000/ XP 1. Enter the system panel menu and select 'SYSTEM', 'PROPERTIES', 'HARDWARE', 'DEVICE MANAGER', 'CD-ROM DRIVES' and 'PROPERTIES'. For Windows 98 SE 2. Check the Enable digital CD audio for this CDROM device setting option is selected (enabled). Note:-For windows 98 SE you may need to refer to your PC's manual for correct configuration. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted podría gozar de otros derechos que varían de un estado a otro. Philips, P.O. Box 520890, Miami, FL 33152, USA,(402) 536-4171 EL6095T004 / 8-02 Connecting to USB PC Link (See 9) The USB PC LINK allows you to playback your music collection from the PC via the powerful amplifier and speakers of this set. IMPORTANT! Make sure the MusicMatch software has been installed. Refer to "Quick Setup Guide" for the USB PC Link. 1. Turn on your set and computer . ] Check your PC volume is suitably adjusted and not set to minimum / mute. 2. Press SOURCE (USB on the remote control) once or more to select USB PC LINK . 3. If correctly connected your PC will automatically launch MUSICMATCH JUKEBOX. ] If the audio streaming is detected, the current track name scrolls . ] If scrolls for a while, check the connection between your PC and set. 4. Press ¡ or ™ until the desired track in the playlist is highlighted. 5. Press 2; to start playback. ] The track time appears and the track name scrolls once. Note: The display only supports English characters in uppercase. 6. If you want to see the track details displayed press MODE. During playback, – Press SHUFFLE on the remote control to play all available tracks in the playlist in random order. – Press REPEAT on the remote control to repeat playback all the tracks in the playlist. 7. To cancel play modes/ stop playback, press 9 or select another sound sources. MAINTENANCE & SAFETY (See 0) CD player and disc handling • If the CD player cannot read CDs correctly, use a cleaning CD to clean the lens before taking the set to repair. • The lens of the CD player should never be touched! • Sudden changes in the surrounding temperature can cause condensation on the lens of your CD player. Playing a CD is then not possible. Do not attempt to clean the lens but leave the set in a warm environment until the moisture evaporates. • To clean the CD, wipe in a straight line from the center towards the edge using a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use cleaning agents as they may damage the disc. • Never write on a CD or attach any stickers to it. Safety Information • Don't expose the set, batteries, CDs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat. • Clean the set with a dry cloth. Don't use any cleaning agents containing alcohol, ammonia, benzene or abrasives as these may harm the set. • Place the set on a hard and flat surface so that the system does not tilt. Make sure there is good ventilation to prevent the set from overheating. • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing. • Do not place any sources of danger on the apparatus (e.g. liquid filled objects, lighted candles). If a fault occurs, first check the points listed below before taking the set for repair. If you are unable to remedy a problem by following these hints, consult your dealer or service center. CAUTION WARNING: Do not open the set as there is a risk of electric shock! Under no Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure or other unsafe operation. circumstances should you try to repair the set yourself, as this will invalidate the warranty. No sound /power – • – • – • – • – • • • – • Volume not adjusted Adjust the VOLUME Power cord not securely connected Connect the AC power cord properly Batteries flat / incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Headphones connected to the set Disconnect headphones Electrostatic discharge/interference Unplug the set. If batteries inserted, remove batteries from the battery compartment. Press and hold STANDBY ON y for 10 seconds, then re-plug / replace battery supply, and try activating the set again. When in USB PC LINK mode, check that your PC's volume is audible and not set to minimum. When playing a CD from the PC's CD-ROM drive, refer to USB PC Link - Enable digital CD audio output. CD contains non-audio files Press SEARCH ∞ or §. once or more to skip to a CD audio track, instead of the data file Poor sound quality in GAME•AUX mode • Adjust the volume on the set or on your game console Severe radio hum or noise – Electrical interference: set too close to TV, VCR or computer • Move the set to increase the distance Remote control does not function properly – • – • Batteries flat/ incorrectly inserted Insert (fresh) batteries correctly Distance/ angle between the set too large Reduce the distance/ angle Poor radio reception – Weak radio signal • FM / AM: Adjust the FM / AM telescopic aerial indication – CD-R(W) is blank/ not finalized • Use an unfinalized CD-R(W) indication – • – • – • No CD inserted Inserted a suitable disc CD badly scratched or dirty Replace/ clean CD, see Maintenance Laser lens steamed up Wait until lens has cleared The CD skips tracks – CD damaged or dirty • Replace or clean CD – shuffle or program is active • Switch off shuffle / program is displayed in USB PC LINK mode for more than 10 sconds – Check the connection between your PC and the set. If necessary, please refer to the chapter Connecting to USB PC Link for the initial setup required. • Make sure the connected PC is turned on and the MusicMatch software is working. Sound skips during MP3 playback – MP3 file made at compression level exceeding 320kbps • Use a lower compression level to record CD tracks into MP3 format – Disc damaged or dirty • Replace or clean disc Cannot find desired MP3 title – Wrong file extension used and/ or file name with unsuitable text characters used • Make sure the file names are typed in English text characters an that the MP3 files end with .mp3 Environmental information We have done our best to reduce the packaging and make it easy to separate into 3 materials:cardboard, expandable polystyrene, polyethylene. Your set consists of materials which can be recycled if disassembled by a specialized company. Please observe the local regulations regarding the disposal of packaging, exhausted batteries and old equipment. Philips AZ2558 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Philips Consumer Electronics North America One Philips Drive Knoxville TN 37914 Phone: 1-800-531-0039